<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Michaelmyk</id>
	<title>Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Michaelmyk"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/Special:Contributions/Michaelmyk"/>
	<updated>2026-05-18T06:46:38Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245358</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245358"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T15:03:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;*&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Menü Titel&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Dieser Text wird angezeigt, für den neu hinzugefügten Menüpunkt. Für diesen speziellen Fall verwenden wir das Word &amp;quot;Probe&amp;quot;. Hinweis: &amp;quot;Menütitel&amp;quot; ist...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Menü Titel&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Dieser Text wird angezeigt, für den neu hinzugefügten Menüpunkt. Für diesen speziellen Fall verwenden wir das Word &amp;quot;Probe&amp;quot;. Hinweis: &amp;quot;Menütitel&amp;quot; ist ein Pflichtfeld.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot; - nur für registrierte Benutzer&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Special&amp;quot; - Gruppe zugewiesener Benutzer neben &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/33/de&amp;diff=245357</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/33/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/33/de&amp;diff=245357"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T15:03:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;*&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Menü Titel&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Dieser Text wird angezeigt, für den neu hinzugefügten Menüpunkt. Für diesen speziellen Fall verwenden wir das Word &amp;quot;Probe&amp;quot;. Hinweis: &amp;quot;Menütitel&amp;quot; ist...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*&amp;quot;&amp;quot;Menü Titel&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Dieser Text wird angezeigt, für den neu hinzugefügten Menüpunkt. Für diesen speziellen Fall verwenden wir das Word &amp;quot;Probe&amp;quot;. Hinweis: &amp;quot;Menütitel&amp;quot; ist ein Pflichtfeld.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245347</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245347"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:59:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;** &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot; - nur für registrierte Benutzer&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot; - nur für registrierte Benutzer&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Special&amp;quot; - Gruppe zugewiesener Benutzer neben &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/42/de&amp;diff=245346</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/42/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/42/de&amp;diff=245346"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:59:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;** &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot; - nur für registrierte Benutzer&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;** &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot; - nur für registrierte Benutzer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245345</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245345"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:58:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;** &amp;quot;Special&amp;quot; - Gruppe zugewiesener Benutzer neben &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Special&amp;quot; - Gruppe zugewiesener Benutzer neben &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/43/de&amp;diff=245344</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/43/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/43/de&amp;diff=245344"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:58:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;** &amp;quot;Special&amp;quot; - Gruppe zugewiesener Benutzer neben &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;** &amp;quot;Special&amp;quot; - Gruppe zugewiesener Benutzer neben &amp;quot;Registriert&amp;quot;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/47/de&amp;diff=245343</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/47/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/47/de&amp;diff=245343"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:55:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;===Options Tab===&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Options Tab===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245342</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245342"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:54:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/52/de&amp;diff=245341</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/52/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/52/de&amp;diff=245341"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:54:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245338</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245338"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:54:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/57/de&amp;diff=245337</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/57/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/57/de&amp;diff=245337"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:54:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245336</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245336"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:53:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/54/de&amp;diff=245335</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/54/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/54/de&amp;diff=245335"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:53:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245334</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245334"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:53:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/53/de&amp;diff=245333</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/53/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/53/de&amp;diff=245333"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:53:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;* &amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245328</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245328"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:53:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/41/de&amp;diff=245327</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/41/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/41/de&amp;diff=245327"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:53:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;** &amp;quot;Öffentlich&amp;quot; - Alle Besucher&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245326</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245326"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:52:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/57/de&amp;diff=245325</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/57/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/57/de&amp;diff=245325"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:52:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;quot;Anzeigen Kategorie&amp;quot; - (Global/Hide/Show). Ob die Beitragskategorie angezeigt wird oder nicht.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245314</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245314"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:50:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/54/de&amp;diff=245313</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/54/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/54/de&amp;diff=245313"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:50:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;quot;Verknüpfte Titel&amp;quot; - (Global/No/Yes). Wenn der Titel des Beitrages angezeigt wird, ob es einen Link zum Beitrag gibt.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245300</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245300"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:49:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/53/de&amp;diff=245299</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/53/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/53/de&amp;diff=245299"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:49:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;quot;Titel anzeigen&amp;quot; - (Global/Verstecken/Anzeigen). Um den Titel des Beitrages anzuzeigen oder nicht.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245294</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245294"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:45:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionen&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/52/de&amp;diff=245293</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/52/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/52/de&amp;diff=245293"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:45:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Optionen&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245292</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245292"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:45:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/51/de&amp;diff=245291</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/51/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/51/de&amp;diff=245291"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:45:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Beachte bitte, dass dieses &amp;quot;Globale Einstellungen&amp;quot; sind. Wenn diese Einstellungen gewählt werden, werden die Vorgaben des ... &amp;quot;Beitrags-Managers&amp;quot;... verwendet.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245289</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245289"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:41:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;de&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-de.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/49/de&amp;diff=245288</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/49/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/49/de&amp;diff=245288"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:41:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;de&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;de&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245287</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245287"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:41:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Optionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/50/de&amp;diff=245286</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/50/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/50/de&amp;diff=245286"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:41:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Optionen&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Optionen&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245284</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245284"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:39:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib die Beitragsdetails ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/31/de&amp;diff=245283</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/31/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/31/de&amp;diff=245283"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:39:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Gib die Beitragsdetails ein&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245282</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245282"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:39:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/28/de&amp;diff=245281</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/28/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/28/de&amp;diff=245281"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:39:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Auf der neuen Seite befüllst Du die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachte, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245280</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245280"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:38:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/26/de&amp;diff=245279</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/26/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/26/de&amp;diff=245279"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:38:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Wir sind fast fertig. Bleibe dran!&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245278</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245278"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:37:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/20/de&amp;diff=245277</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/20/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/20/de&amp;diff=245277"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:37:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Kehre zu ....... &amp;quot;Menü Item Page&amp;quot;...... zurück und klicke auf die Auswahlliste für Beitrag auswählen&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245276</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245276"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:35:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Returning to the Menu Item Page, click on the Select list for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Article&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/17/de&amp;diff=245275</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/17/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/17/de&amp;diff=245275"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:35:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Wähle &amp;quot;Einzel Beitrag&amp;quot; in dem zuvor erweiterten Artikel Abschnitt&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245274</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245274"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Gib Beitrag Details ein&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Article&#039;&#039;&#039; in the previously expanded Articles section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Returning to the Menu Item Page, click on the Select list for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Article&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/31/de&amp;diff=245273</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/31/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/31/de&amp;diff=245273"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Gib Beitrag Details ein&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Gib Beitrag Details ein&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245272</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245272"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;de&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Article&#039;&#039;&#039; in the previously expanded Articles section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Returning to the Menu Item Page, click on the Select list for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Article&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-de.png|Enter Article Details]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/30/de&amp;diff=245271</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/30/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/30/de&amp;diff=245271"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;de&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;de&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/29/de&amp;diff=245270</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/29/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/29/de&amp;diff=245270"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;===Details Tab===&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===Details Tab===&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245269</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245269"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennze...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Article&#039;&#039;&#039; in the previously expanded Articles section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Returning to the Menu Item Page, click on the Select list for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Article&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-en.png|Enter Article Details]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/28/de&amp;diff=245268</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/28/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/28/de&amp;diff=245268"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:31:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennze...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Auf der neuen Seite füllen Sie die anderen Felder wie unten aufgeführt. Beachten Sie, dass die &amp;quot;Erforderlichen&amp;quot; Felder durch ein Sternchen(*) neben der Beschriftung gekennzeichnet sind.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/27/de&amp;diff=245265</id>
		<title>Translations:Adding a menu item which points to an Article/27/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Translations:Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/27/de&amp;diff=245265"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:29:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;==Tabs==&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Tabs==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245264</id>
		<title>Adding a menu item which points to an Article/de</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.sandbox.joomla.org/index.php?title=Adding_a_menu_item_which_points_to_an_Article/de&amp;diff=245264"/>
		<updated>2015-10-24T14:29:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michaelmyk: Created page with &amp;quot;Wir sind fast fertig.&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&amp;lt;languages /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Top portal heading|color=white-bkgd|icon=book|icon-color=#5091cd|size=4x|text-color=#333|title=Anleitung}}&lt;br /&gt;
Die folgende Anleitung zeigt Dir, wie Du einen neuen Eintrag in dem Hauptmenü erzeugst, der auf die Beiträge Support und Dokumentation verweist. Basierend auf diesen Informationen wirst Du in der Lage sein, einen neuen Menüpunkt anzulegen und mit einem zuvor von Dir erstellten Beitrag in Deinem Menü zu verknüpfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Du Dich zur Zeit nicht im Administrationsbereich angemeldet hast, dann tue dieses jetzt. Wenn Du Dich bereits im Administratorenbereich angemeldet hast, kannst Du diesen Schritt übergehen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Öffne ein neues Browser-Fenster und gib die URL ein, ähnlich dieser&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.your-site-name-here.com/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
oder, wenn Du Joomla! auf Deinem lokalen Computer installiert hast &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://localhost/your-folder-name-here/administrator&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Melde Dich als Administrator oder Super-Administrator an.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Innerhalb des Administarinsbereiches, wählst Du in der oberen linken Ecke &amp;quot;Menü&amp;quot; aus der Menü-Leiste. Aus der Drop-Down-Liste, wählst Du das Menü, mit dem Du arbeiten möchtest. Verfügbar ist das Menü Hauptmenü, als Standard oder alle weiteren angezeigten Menüs. Dieses öffnet den Menüpunkt Manager. Du kannst den Menü Manager auch in der linken Spalte Menü auswählen und dann das Menü auswählen, das Dir in der Liste angeboten wird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-de.jpg|Wähle Hauptmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. In der Symbolleiste an der oberen linken Ecke, wählst Du &amp;quot;Neue&amp;quot; (angezeigt durch das grüne Symbol mit dem plus-Zeichen). Dies öffnet den Menüpunkt: [Neu] - Seite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Edit-Main-Menu-Toolbar-new-de.png|Klicke auf Neu]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Von dem Menüpunkt klickst Du auf die Auswahl &amp;quot;Menü Typ&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Select-Type-de.png|Wähle Menü Typ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird angezeigt, wähle &amp;quot;Beiträge&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Types-de.png|Wähle Beiträge]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Single Article&#039;&#039;&#039; in the previously expanded Articles section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Type-de.png|Wähle &amp;quot;Beitrag Layout&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Returning to the Menu Item Page, click on the Select list for the &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Article&#039;&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-de.png|Wähle Beitragsliste]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Eine Liste Deiner Beiträge wird angezeigt. Wähle einen Titel durch Anklicken aus. Du kannst die Suche nach dem Beitrag eingrenzen, indem Du die Drop-Down-Tools am oberen Rand benutzt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:J3x-Add-Main-Menu-Article-Select-Article-List-de.png|Gib Beitrag Details ein]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sind fast fertig. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tabs==&lt;br /&gt;
On the new page fill in the different fields as listed below. Note that the &amp;quot;Required&amp;quot; fields are indicated by an asterisk(*) next to the label.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Details Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-en.png|Enter Article Details]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Details&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This will be the text displayed for the newly added menu item. For this particular case let&#039;s use the word &#039;&#039;&#039;Sample&#039;&#039;&#039;. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Title&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Alias&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Usually, you will leave this empty and Joomla! will fill this in for you automatically. The content of this field will determine the page URL when SEF is activated.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Location&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This should already be set to Main Menu (or the menu you have previously chosen). Here you have the possibility to move the item to another menu if you wish. This field is quite useful when you decide to change the item location later. Note: &amp;quot;Menu Location&amp;quot; is a required field.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Parent Item&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify where to place the new menu item. You can make it the Menu Item Root (top item) or a sub-item of an already existing item. We will choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Menu Item Root&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If you wish your new item to be shown on your site, set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Published&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you would like to make this menu item invisible from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Unpublished&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will make it invisible to your visitors. If you would like to remove this menu item from the site, simply set this to &#039;&#039;&#039;Trashed&#039;&#039;&#039;. It will &#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039; delete the item but will put it in the Trash, from this you can delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Ordering&#039;&#039;&#039; Click on the Save button at the top of the page and the Ordering drop-down will be visible. The new menu item will default to the bottom of the list, but you can change that by selecting the &amp;quot;First&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Last&amp;quot; or another menu item in the list to change its position.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Default Page&#039;&#039;&#039; You can select this option if you&#039;d like this menu item to be your Home Page.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Access Level&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This option will specify who will be able to see this new menu item:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Public&#039;&#039; - All visitors&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Registered&#039;&#039; - Registered users only&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Special&#039;&#039; - users assigned to any group besides &amp;quot;Registered&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Target Window&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Here you can specify how to open the article. It can be the same browser window (Parent Window with Browser Navigation), a new browser window (New Window with Browser navigation) or a pop-up window (New Window without Browser Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Template Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific template for this menu item, or leave as &#039;Use default&#039; for the default template.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Language&#039;&#039;&#039; - Select a specific language or leave the default &amp;quot;All&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Options Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Now, let&#039;s click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; tab at the top of the page. Here are more options you can choose for the display of your menu item. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
{{-}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Options-en.png|Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that these options include &amp;quot;Use Global&amp;quot;. If this is selected, the setting from the Article Manager Options will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Title.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Linked Titles&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Title is shown, whether to show it as a link to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Intro Text&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, the Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article - If set to Hide, only the part of the article after the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; break will show.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Position of Article Info&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below/Split). Position of Article Info. Puts the article information block above or below the text or splits it into two separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Category&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039;  - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s Parent Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Parent&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s Parent Category is shown, whether to show it as a link to a &#039;&#039;&#039;Category layout&#039;&#039;&#039; - (list or blog) for that Category.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show) Whether to show the author of the Article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Author&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If the Article&#039;s author is shown, whether to show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author. Note that the author must be set up as a Contact in Contact Manager{{rarr}}Edit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Create Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s create date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Modify Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s modify date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Publish Date&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the Article&#039;s start publishing date.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Navigation&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show a navigation link (for example, Next or Previous article) when you drill down to the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Voting&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Whether or not to show the a voting icon for the article.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Icons&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). If set to Show, Print and Email will use icons instead of text.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Print Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Print Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Email Icon&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Email Article button.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Hits&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the number of times the article has been hit (displayed by a user).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Hide/Show). Show or Hide the Tags.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Unauthorised Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/No/Yes). If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the &amp;quot;Read More&amp;quot; link will require users to log in to view the full article content.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Positioning of the Links&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Above/Below). If Above, links are shown above the content. Otherwise they are shown below the content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link Types Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
This section will let you customize the way the page containing the article will be displayed. If you decide to explore all your options, you will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Link-Types-en.png|Options Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Link Types&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Title Attribute&#039;&#039;&#039;  - An optional, custom description for the title attribute of the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link CSS Style&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional, custom style to apply to the menu hyperlink.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Link Image&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional image to be used with the menu hyperlink. The image you would like to associate with the item must be stored in the images/ folder. You can upload your own image using the Media Manager or by FTP.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Menu Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Yes/No). If the optional image is added, adds the menu title next to the image. Default is &#039;Yes&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Page Display Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Display-Tab-en.png|Page Display Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page Display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Browser Page Title&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this parameter is left blank, Joomla! will generate a Browser Page Title automatically.  This can be used to override the page title set in the article. Don&#039;t forget that page titles are one of the most important points when it comes to search engine optimization (SEO)! Use them wisely.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Display (Use Global/Yes/No) the page title set in the previous parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Heading&#039;&#039;&#039; - Optional alternative text for the Page heading.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Page Class&#039;&#039;&#039; - This allows you to generate unique CSS classes for this page. This comes in useful when you would like to change the look of the page to differentiate it from the rest of the site. If you don&#039;t need this, simply leave the field empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metadata Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is where you can customize your meta tags for SEO optimization. You will find good help in the tool tips that appear when you move your mouse over the labels. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Metadata-Tab-en.png|Metadata Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Metadata&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Description&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Meta Keywords&#039;&#039;&#039; - An optional comma-separated list of keywords and/or phrases to be used in the HTML output.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Robots&#039;&#039;&#039; - (Use Global/Index, Follow/No index, follow/Index, No follow/No index, no follow). Robots Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Secure&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;This is for specifying the SSL security for your page:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039; - As a secure page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039; - As a standard page&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;Ignore&#039;&#039; - Displayed as the other pages - secure or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Module Assignment Tab===&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the tab labeled &#039;&#039;&#039;Module Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;. In this area, you can make adjustments to modules. Please see this link for specific information on the options available in the Module area. &lt;br /&gt;
[[S:MyLanguage/Help34:Extensions_Module_Manager_Menu|Extensions Module Manager Menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Item-Page-Module-Assignment-Tab-en.png|Module Assigment Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are done, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the upper-left corner. This will save your work. This will save the new item and place it as the last element (or sub-element, in case of sub-menu items) in the menu. After the first save you can change the item order position within the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
The Save and Close button options are described below the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Joomla-3-Menu-Add-Menu-Save-en.png|Click Save]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and stays in the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and closes the current screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save &amp;amp; New&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves the menu item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Save as Copy&#039;&#039;&#039; - Saves your changes to a copy of the current menu item. Does not affect the current menu item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, go back to the front-end and refresh the page. You should be able to see your new menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you might need to log in as a registered user or administrator to view the new item. It all depends on the Access Level you have set (see above). When you click the new item, the article will be opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Tutorials]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Menu Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Article Management]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Beginners]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/noinclude&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michaelmyk</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>